دليل مرجعي

ManualsBrandsNikon ManualsDigital CameraCOOLPIX A

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻲﻌﺟﺮﻣ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (278 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‬ ‫‪Ar‬‬
PAGE 2
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺨﻂ ﺳﻤﻴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC/SDXC‬ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 12‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ‪...................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.......
PAGE 4
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻊ ‪ .COOLPIX A‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ" )‪.(vi 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪.(20 0‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.
PAGE 5
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(2 0‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪) t‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ؛ ‪.(75 0‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )‪.(29 0‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ )‪.(30 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪.(33 0‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(25 0‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 7
‫‪ A‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 8
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻴﺎﺯﺗﻚ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎﺧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﹰﺍ ﻳﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﺟﻮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ )ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤ ﹶﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹶ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﹸﺒﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪iv .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪vi .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ix ........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪2 ...................................................................
PAGE 14
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪27 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ "ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺪﻓﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪29 ........................(i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪33 ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪34 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‪35 ......
PAGE 15
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ‪M‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪52 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪53 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪54 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪55 .....................................................................................
PAGE 16
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪85‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪85 ..........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪87 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪89 ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪92 ..................................................
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪132‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪132.......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪134......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪140...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪142..................................................................................................
PAGE 18
‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪176.....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪176..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪177...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪178................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪179..........................................
PAGE 19
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪197..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪198...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪200.....................................................................................................D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪201...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪202......................................................
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪238..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ‪238.......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ(‪238........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪240...................................................................................... (M ،A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪240..............................
PAGE 21
‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ؛ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ؛ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪112....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪29 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪38 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪2 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪iv .......................................
PAGE 23
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ‪43 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪112....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪67 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪231...........USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪74 .............................
PAGE 24
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪30 ،23 .....................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪112..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪172 ،12 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪132 ،33 ..............
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ(‪:‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪24 22 20 18‬‬ ‫‪25 23 21 19‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪9 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪113......................................
PAGE 26
‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1/12‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪NORMAL‬‬ ‫‪4928x3264‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪100NIKON DSC _0001. JPG‬‬ ‫‪15/05/2013 15 : 30 : 05‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪146.................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪197...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪69 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪72 .....................
PAGE 27
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .P‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )‪ (13 0‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪69 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪72 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪89 ...................
PAGE 28
‫‪ A‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ P‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(29 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺻﻮﺏ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ‪M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ — P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ )‪(53 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ — S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(54 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ — A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(55 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ — M‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ )‪(56 0‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ d‬ﻭ‪(60 0) e‬‬ ‫ﺧﺰﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(N /L) E‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(g) S‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪P‬؛ ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬؛‬ ‫‪.(56 ،54 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪A‬؛ ‪.(55 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪M‬؛ ‪.(56 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S ،P‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪A‬؛ ‪.(87 0‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ (N/L) E‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺯﺭ ‪ (N/L) E‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :D‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(172 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :N‬ﻳﻨﻘﺢ )‪(197 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :C‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(176 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :m/O‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ؛ ‪(221 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :B‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪(182 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪:J‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.
PAGE 35
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻏﺎﻟ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،J‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(172 0‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻲ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ؟‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(176 0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﻧ
PAGE 37
‫‪) sRGB‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪NR‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ‬ ‫)‪(ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫)‪(ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(
PAGE 38
‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪* Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫* ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) EN-EL20‬ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MH-27‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻻﺝ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ )‪ (w‬ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )‪ ،(q‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪ A‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ viii – vi‬ﻭ‪ 235 – 233‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .
PAGE 43
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) (SD) Secure Digital‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ؛ ‪ .(251 0‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺄ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ SD‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫"‪) "lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ( ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "‪) "write‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪16G‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪ A‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EP-5C‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .(247 0) EH-5b‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪ A‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟـ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺄ‬ ‫)‪189 0‬؛ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ .K‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫"ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺪﻓﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(i‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪،i‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ "ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺪﻓﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.i‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺬﻋﻚ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﻭﻗﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻚ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻕ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻌﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .
PAGE 50
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ؛ ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .
PAGE 51
‫‪ A‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪ D‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﻨﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﺝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻀﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﺎﻃﻒ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪h‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .h‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻖ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪ m‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻤﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 26‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ،L‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪ n‬ﻣﻘﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻇﻠﻴﺔ ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﻠﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.P‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .J‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1/8000‬ﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1/30‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ )‪ (53 0‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬ﻭ‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 20‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ 59‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(43 0‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ )‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺭﻣﺰ "ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ"‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺩﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﻨﻨﺔ ﻭﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻤﻮﺝ ﻭﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ؛ ‪ .
PAGE 63
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪،2‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )‪ .(132 0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪(Q) W/X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﺨﻔﻀﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ K/‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 172‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺘﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻬﺬﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 68
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (N/L) E‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(N/L) E‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪ .
PAGE 69
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪:J‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ :‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.5‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 9‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .
PAGE 70
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪45‬؛ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (N/L) E‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(N/L) E‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 9‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻳﻨﻘﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪#‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ‪M‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ )‪ (53 0‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺴﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(54 0‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪ :P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،P‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )"ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻥ"(‪ .
PAGE 74
‫‪ :S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫"ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ" ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪ :A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ( ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺧﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ( ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 76
‫‪ :M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ (N/L) E‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (N/L) E‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 77
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ "‪) "Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ "‪) "Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( )‪ ،(58 0‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪EV 1/3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪EV 2‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪.
PAGE 78
‫❚❚ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) A‬ﻓﺘﺢ(‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ 35 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .(231 0) MC-DC2‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪ MC-DC2‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ‪) A‬ﻓﺘﺢ(‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ "‪) B‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ("‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ (66 0‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻓﺘﺢ(‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪$‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻌﺎ‬ ‫‪ U1‬ﻭ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ d‬ﻭ‪ e‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.U2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ U2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ d‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﱠﻨﺔ ﻟـ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ e‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﱠﻨﺔ ﻟـ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.U2‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟـ ‪ d‬ﺃﻭ ‪ e‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.U2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.
PAGE 83
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫‪ E‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .J‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ؛ ﺃﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫)‪ (116–112 0‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ML-L3‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (231 0‬ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺟﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪ D‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ML-L3‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ML-L3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ $‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )‪ (ML-L3‬ﻭ‪ %‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺧﺮ )‪ ، (ML-L3‬ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.(252 0‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪ A‬ﺻﻮﺭ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ (123 0‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ )‪.JPEG+NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) Capture NX 2‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛ ‪ (231 0‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ViewNX 2‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪:JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﻢ( *‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪27.6 × 41.7‬‬ ‫‪3264 × 4928‬‬ ‫‪ #‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪20.7 × 31.3‬‬ ‫‪2448 × 3696‬‬ ‫‪ $‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪13.8 × 20.9‬‬ ‫‪1632 × 2464‬‬ ‫‪ %‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ 300‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ؛ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ = ‪ 2.54‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 93
‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪.(176 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺯﺭ ‪(g) S‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪(g) S‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪N‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪ (80 ،75 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪AF-F‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪.i‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫&‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪35‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻫﺪﻑ؛ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪ .
PAGE 98
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ :‬ﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﺠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪ ،(75 0‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .
PAGE 100
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫)ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ(‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ .X‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ(‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) Hi 0.3‬ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ (ISO 8000‬ﻭ‪) Hi 2‬ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪.(ISO 25600‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪3200‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A ،S ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،A ،S ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟـ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ < ISO‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 104
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .(ISO 100‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ ،A‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟـ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ )‪ 1-1/1000‬ﺙ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 105
‫‪V‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،A ،S ،P‬ﻭ‪) M‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 106
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ (g) S‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ )‪ .(85 0‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪EV -5‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ( ﻭ ‪) EV +5‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ( ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .EV 1/3‬ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 108
‫‪ A‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪.(7 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (180 0‬ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ؛ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 109
‫‪r‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،P‬ﻭ ‪ ،S‬ﻭ ‪ ،A‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ v‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫‪ I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪*.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪−3500‬‬ ‫‪K 8000‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪*.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪K 5400‬‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪K 6000‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺒﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫‪K 8000‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪ L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫)‪.(94 0‬‬ ‫* ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.
PAGE 111
‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ ،(176 0‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ (92 0‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪.(94 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 112
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ" ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .
PAGE 113
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )‪(G‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺒﺮﻱ )‪(A‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ )‪(B‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ )‪(M‬‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ )"*"( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪ .
PAGE 114
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.
PAGE 115
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ‪ L‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﱠﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﱠﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .
PAGE 117
‫❚❚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 118
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻮﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪X‬؛ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.
PAGE 119
‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪Picture Controls‬‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .
PAGE 120
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Controls‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ )‪ (106 0‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 122
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪ .(103 0‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.O‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 123
‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) (Picture Controls‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ -2‬ﻭ ‪ +2‬ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺨﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺮﻕ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﹰﺎ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫‪) "A" D‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 102‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ .
PAGE 125
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻌﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪106‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 127
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 103‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ )‪ C-1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (C-9‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .
PAGE 128
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪X‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ < Picture Control‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ Picture Control Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Capture NX 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬ ‫)‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ(‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪S‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 131
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ Y‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ Z ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‪ P ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪ Q ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ‪ X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪Y‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 132
‫‪l‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪l‬‬ ‫‪112‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻓﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (M‬ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪w ،s ،n ،p ،k ،i‬‬ ‫‪ NR‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ NjR‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪j‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪Nj‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪A ،P‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪+‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪NjS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪+‬‬ ‫‪NjU‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪NU‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪j‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪M ،S‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫‪Nj‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪NT‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ NS‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ * NT‬ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪+‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫*
PAGE 134
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪l‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .J‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺳﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪) R‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) j‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ(‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 135
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ f‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.193‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﹰﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻒ؛ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺟﻴﺰ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪EV -3‬‬ ‫)ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﻪ( ﻭ ‪) EV +1‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰﺎ( ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪EV 1/3‬؛ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 137
‫‪ A‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ SB-910‬ﻭ‪ SB-900‬ﻭ‪ SB-800‬ﻭ‪SB-700‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭ‪ SB-600‬ﻭ‪SB-400‬؛ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ‪ SB-400‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪:FV‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪.f‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 139
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.FV‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪،(M‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻴﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .f‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﹸﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.(e) FV‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪f‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.
PAGE 140
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ TTL‬ﻟـ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪.(181 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﻭ)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ( ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ AA‬ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 141
‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 122‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ G‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪*Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪M ،A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪،123‬‬ ‫‪181‬‬ ‫‪M ،A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪99‬‬ ‫‪M ،A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫‪M ،A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫‪0 ،M ،A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫‪w ،n ،p ،k ،i‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪0.
PAGE 143
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ )‪ (ADL‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ "ﻳﺼﺤﺢ" ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﻭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 144
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ 0.3‬ﻭ‪) EV 2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ (WB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) ADL‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪.(ADL‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .
PAGE 145
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ :ADL‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪110 0‬؛ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .
PAGE 146
‫‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪،P‬‬ ‫‪ A ،S‬ﺃﻭ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺟﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 148
‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ .
PAGE 149
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .(J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ GP-1 GPS‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (231 0‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (3 0‬ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪ ،GPS‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ؛ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﱠﻡ ﻣﻊ ‪.GP-1‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ GPS‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 151
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪n‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪:n‬‬ ‫• ‪) n‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .GPS‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.(138 0) GPS‬‬ ‫• ‪) n‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‪ :‬ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪ GPS‬ﻋﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.GPS‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪ GPS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .
PAGE 152
‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(N/L) E‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪X‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪132‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪O‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪J‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫"ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ"‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ 4 ،‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )‪.(134 0‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪(Q)W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 140‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 144‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ" ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ RGB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟـ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.(173 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪ GPS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1/1‬‬ ‫‪:N‬‬ ‫'‪: 35 º 36. 371‬‬ ‫‪:E‬‬ ‫'‪: 1 39 º 43.
PAGE 155
‫❚❚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1/12‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪NORMAL‬‬ ‫‪4928x3264‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪100NIKON DSC _0001. JPG‬‬ ‫‪15/05/2013 15 : 30 : 05‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪146......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪197....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪69 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪72 ................
PAGE 156
‫‪ A‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .X‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪.
PAGE 157
‫❚❚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪: , 1 / 1 2 5 , F5 . 6‬‬ ‫‪: , 100‬‬ ‫‪: +1. 3‬‬ ‫‪: 1 8 . 5 mm‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪:S‬‬ ‫‪: Bu i l t - i n‬‬ ‫‪: S L OW‬‬ ‫‪: T T L -B L , + 0. 3‬‬ ‫‪F O C A L L E NG T H‬‬ ‫‪L ENS‬‬ ‫‪A F / VR‬‬ ‫‪F L ASH T YP E‬‬ ‫‪S Y N C MO D E‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪COOLP I X A‬‬ ‫‪1/12‬‬ ‫‪: AU T O 1 , 0 , 0‬‬ ‫‪: s RGB‬‬ ‫‪: S T ANDARD‬‬ ‫‪:0‬‬ ‫‪:3‬‬ ‫‪:0‬‬ ‫‪:0‬‬ ‫‪:0‬‬ ‫‪:0‬‬ ‫‪1/12‬‬ ‫‪M T R , S P D, A P .‬‬ ‫‪E X P .
PAGE 158
‫‪N O I S E R E D U C . : H I I S O, N O R M‬‬ ‫‪A C T . D - L I G H T . : N O R MA L‬‬ ‫‪: D - L I GH T I NG‬‬ ‫‪R E T OU C H‬‬ ‫‪W ARM F I L T E R‬‬ ‫‪CO L OR BA L ANCE‬‬ ‫‪TR I M‬‬ ‫‪: SPR I NG HAS COME .‬‬ ‫‪COMMENT‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪179.....................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪179......................‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ‪110............................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪197..............................
PAGE 159
‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪16 17 18‬‬ ‫‪18. 5mm‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪1213 14‬‬ ‫‪1/ 125 F5. 6‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪+ 1. 0‬‬ ‫‪–1. 3‬‬ ‫‪SLOW‬‬ ‫‪0, 0‬‬ ‫‪21 20 19‬‬ ‫‪23 22‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪18. 5mm‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪16 146......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪197‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪....................................................
PAGE 160
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ "ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ" ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 72‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.(Q) W‬‬ ‫‪(Q)W‬‬ ‫‪(Q)W‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪(Q)W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪140‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ (N/L) E‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 146‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ K /‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 172‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (Q) W‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 72‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 163
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ (N/L) E‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 146‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪K/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪.(148 0‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 172‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪144‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪) ×31‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) ×23 (Q) W / X‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) ×15‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 165
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ (N/L) E‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 146‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪K/‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 172‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 166
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ (N/L) E‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.(183 0‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻠﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.
PAGE 167
‫‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ (N/L) E‬ﻭ‪ O‬ﻣﻌﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 169
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪.(173 0‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .
PAGE 171
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .O‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ؛ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪.(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 172
‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪X‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪152‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.
PAGE 173
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 174
‫‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ViewNX 2TM ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 175
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Region Selection‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Installation Guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.
PAGE 176
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ )‪.(154 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪UC-E16‬؛ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :SD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﹰﺍ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 177
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ" ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ "ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ" )‪ ،(q‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Start Transfer‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ( )‪ .(w‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 178
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‬ ‫• ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭ ﹰﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Mac OS‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.
PAGE 179
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(249 0) PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.UC-E16‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 180
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL20‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EH-5b‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .(230 0) EP-5C‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(178 0) sRGB‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ؛ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪X‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪144 0‬؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ .(Q) W‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺺ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻳﻘﺘﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺺ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 183
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ :(DPOF‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ .(166 0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 184
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ .X‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .1‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Z‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪99‬؛‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪ .
PAGE 185
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) 161‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 242‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 186
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ :DPOF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ "ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪.DPOF‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) 2‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ؟(‪.
PAGE 187
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‬ ‫)ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(5‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 188
‫‪ D‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ "ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ" ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫)‪ .(163 0‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ؛ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 189
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪) (HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ (C‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 190
‫‪ A‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EH-5b‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) EP-5C‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .
PAGE 191
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪) HDMI-CEC‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪-‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،HDMI-CEC‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟـ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 192
‫‪U‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪150‬‬ ‫‪173‬‬ ‫‪173‬‬ ‫‪173‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 193
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (177 0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )‪ .
PAGE 194
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )‪ (187 0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ "ﻋﺮﺿﻲ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‪.
PAGE 195
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )‪.(134 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 196
‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 197
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪) NIKON‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.108-107‬‬ ‫• ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺟﺪﻳ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪.
PAGE 198
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ sRGB‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ "ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ "،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.
PAGE 199
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺙ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫)ﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﺎﺏ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻳﺘﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ؛ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ(‪ .
PAGE 200
‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 201
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪TTL 1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ‪ 1/32) 1/32‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 202
‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.
PAGE 203
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )‪.(156 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 204
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .(134 0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺯﺋﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 205
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(25 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ .
PAGE 206
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) ViewNX 2‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Capture NX 2‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛ ‪ .(231 0‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ .(137 0‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 207
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Capture NX 2‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛ ‪ .(231 0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ )ﻋﺮﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ 90°‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ 90°‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .
PAGE 208
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(66 0‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 209
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ؛ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ،EH-5b‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.
PAGE 210
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺧﺮ )‪ (63 0‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ،(63 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ )‪ .(24 0‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 211
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .
PAGE 212
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪MF‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺘﺎﺭ )ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ )ﻗﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫)‪ ،(V‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫)‪ (W‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 213
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪:f‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ f‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪.(113 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ f‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )‪.(63 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪.(66 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ f‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 214
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪J/Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ‪:(g) S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (g) S‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.(81 0) ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (g) S‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪.(89 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (g) S‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪.(72 ،69 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (g) S‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ )‪.
PAGE 215
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 216
‫‪ D‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ‪ WU-1a‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪.WU-1a‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﹸﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ ،(243 0‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 217
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪:‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 218
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪198‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪.(X‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 219
‫‪ A‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ ،(69 0) JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪) JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ .
PAGE 220
‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 221
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ" ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻛﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 222
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ؛ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (Q)W‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪،4 : 5 ،3 : 4 ،2 : 3‬‬ ‫‪ ،1 : 1‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 223
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ )ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ 3 ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 224
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻳﹸﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ )ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍﺀ )ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪3 ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪204‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪.
PAGE 225
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ )‪(135 0‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .X‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 226
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ؛ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪72 ،69 0‬؛ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 227
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ .X‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .1‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،J‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 0.
PAGE 228
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ )ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 229
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪.(69 0) NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 230
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ -2‬ﻭ ‪ .EV +2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.
PAGE 231
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 232
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ .(X‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 233
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺼﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 0.
PAGE 234
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 235
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‪.
PAGE 236
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺩﻳﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 237
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ .(X‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 238
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪218‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪7‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 239
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ )ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ (N‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 240
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ .X‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 241
‫‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ O/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 20‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 242
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 20‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ < ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ )‪ ،(m‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ" ﺇﻟﻰ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‪.
PAGE 243
‫❚❚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺍﺏ‪ .
PAGE 244
‫❚❚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺍﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.
PAGE 245
‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪3-2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.
PAGE 246
‫‪n‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)‪(Speedlights‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪226‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 247
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 248
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪TTL‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪GN‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪AA‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪ RPT‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬
PAGE 249
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،i-TTL‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ )ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪ .
PAGE 250
‫ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ COOLPIX A‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ،EP-5C‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ :EH-5b‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ EH-5a‬ﻭ ‪ .(EH-5‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EP-5C‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ‪ EH-5b‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EH-5a‬ﺃﻭ ‪.EH-5‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 251
‫• ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ‪ :DF-CP1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 28‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ ]‪.[135‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ‪ :Capture NX 2‬ﺑﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 252
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﹰ ﺑﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻘﻄﺮ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 253
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺎﻓﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻤﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.
PAGE 254
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ؛ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،99.99%‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 0.01%‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ .
PAGE 255
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺘ ﹺﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL20‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 256
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.
PAGE 257
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫)‪(ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪MF‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪J/Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪،y ،x‬‬ ‫‪،0 ،z‬‬ ‫‪،2 ،1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬
PAGE 258
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻛﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .
PAGE 259
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(29 0) i‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(69 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ )‪.(179 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻐﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(179 0‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ )‪.
PAGE 260
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(M ،A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ )‪.(89 0‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.(99 0) Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻇﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )‪.(96 0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.(97 0) COOLPIX A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ JPEG+NEF‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 261
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻟﻎ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )‪.(146 0‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ )‪.(24 0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(199 0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪.(148 ،27 0‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ )‪.(24 0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 262
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ .‬ﺃﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 263
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺚ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 264
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺸﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 265
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪COOLPIX A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ 16.2‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 15.6 × 23.6‬ﻣﻢ ‪ CMOS‬ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪DX‬؛ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ 16.93‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪NIKKOR‬‬ ‫‪ 18.
PAGE 266
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ )‪ ،(3264 × 4928‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )‪،(2448 × 3696‬‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )‪(1632 × 2464‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ(‬ ‫‪ISO 100 − 3200‬؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) Hi 0.3 ،6400‬ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪) Hi 0.
PAGE 267
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EN-EL20‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EH-5b‬؛ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) EP-5C‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍ
PAGE 268
‫❚❚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EN-EL20‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ×‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ 7.2‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ 1020 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ ‪° 40 −‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 14.0 × 50.0 × 30.7‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬ ‫‪ 41‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪MH-27‬‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 240−100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60−50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 0.2 ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 8.4‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 0.
PAGE 269
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ :DCF‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)‪ (DCF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :DPOF‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Exif‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :2.3‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) COOLPIX A Exif‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،2.
PAGE 270
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،Mac OS ،Macintosh‬ﻭ ‪ QuickTime‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Apple‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،Windows ،Microsoft .‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻭ ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،HDMI .SD-3C, LLC‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.
PAGE 271
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.COOLPIX A‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪.
PAGE 272
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ )‪ (69 0‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )‪ .(72 0‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.
PAGE 273
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪) i‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪29 ،9 .............................................................‬‬ ‫‪) h‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‪35 ،9 ...................................................‬‬ ‫‪) k‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ‪35 .............................................................‬‬ ‫‪) l‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ‪35 ................................................................‬‬ ‫‪) p‬ﻃﻔﻞ( ‪35 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪) m‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ( ‪36 ...............................
PAGE 274
‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪69 .......................................................................................JPEG‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪69 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪69 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪69 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫)‪209 ،69 ...................................................................NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪69 ......................
PAGE 275
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪206.......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪80-74 ........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪79-74 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪79-75 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪76 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪76 .........................................
PAGE 276
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‪ 190..........................................................................‬ﻕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪99 ........................................ (Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪185.......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪249 ،166 ،163 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪92 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪94 ..........................
PAGE 277
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪63 ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪75 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪35 ........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪53 ...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪76 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪231 ،130 .................................
PAGE 278
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.